1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2021 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322  *	status changed.
323  *
324  */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358 
359 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361 
362 /*
363  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365  * filtering will be disabled.
366  */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368 
369 /**
370  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
377  */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 	RSSI_EVENT,
380 	MLME_EVENT,
381 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384 
385 /**
386  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389  */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394 
395 /**
396  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398  */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402 
403 /**
404  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409  */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 	AUTH_EVENT,
412 	ASSOC_EVENT,
413 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416 
417 /**
418  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422  */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 	MLME_SUCCESS,
425 	MLME_DENIED,
426 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428 
429 /**
430  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434  */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 	u16 reason;
439 };
440 
441 /**
442  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444  * @tid: the tid
445  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446  */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 	u16 tid;
450 	u16 ssn;
451 };
452 
453 /**
454  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459  * @u:union holding the fields above
460  */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 	union {
464 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 	} u;
468 };
469 
470 /**
471  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472  *
473  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474  *
475  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477  */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482 
483 /**
484  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485  *
486  * @lci: LCI subelement content
487  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488  * @lci_len: LCI data length
489  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490  */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 	const u8 *lci;
493 	const u8 *civicloc;
494 	size_t lci_len;
495 	size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497 
498 /**
499  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501  *
502  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504  */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 	u32 min_interval;
507 	u32 max_interval;
508 };
509 
510 /**
511  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512  *
513  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515  *
516  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520  *	ACK, BACK or both
521  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
530  * @assoc: association status
531  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
532  *	or not
533  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
534  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
535  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
536  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
537  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
538  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
539  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
540  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
541  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
542  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
543  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
544  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
545  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
546  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
547  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
548  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
549  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
550  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
551  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
552  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
553  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
554  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
555  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
556  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
557  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
558  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
559  *	the current band.
560  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
561  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
562  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
563  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
564  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
565  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
566  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
567  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
568  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
569  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
570  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
571  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
572  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
573  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
574  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
575  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
576  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
577  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
578  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
579  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
580  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
581  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
582  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
583  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
584  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
585  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
586  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
587  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
588  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
589  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
590  *	your driver/device needs to do.
591  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
592  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
593  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
594  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
595  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
596  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
597  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
598  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
599  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
600  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
601  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
602  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
603  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
604  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
605  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
606  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
607  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
608  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
609  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
610  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
611  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
612  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
613  *	station.
614  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
615  *	responder functionality.
616  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
617  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
618  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
619  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
620  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
621  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
622  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
623  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
624  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
625  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
626  *	connected to (STA)
627  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
628  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
629  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
630  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
631  *	interval.
632  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
633  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
634  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
635  */
636 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
637 	const u8 *bssid;
638 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
639 	bool uora_exists;
640 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
641 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
642 	bool he_support;
643 	bool twt_requester;
644 	bool twt_responder;
645 	bool twt_protected;
646 	bool twt_broadcast;
647 	/* association related data */
648 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
649 	bool ibss_creator;
650 	u16 aid;
651 	/* erp related data */
652 	bool use_cts_prot;
653 	bool use_short_preamble;
654 	bool use_short_slot;
655 	bool enable_beacon;
656 	u8 dtim_period;
657 	u16 beacon_int;
658 	u16 assoc_capability;
659 	u64 sync_tsf;
660 	u32 sync_device_ts;
661 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
662 	u32 basic_rates;
663 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
664 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
665 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
666 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
667 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
668 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
669 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
670 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
671 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
672 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
673 	int arp_addr_cnt;
674 	bool qos;
675 	bool idle;
676 	bool ps;
677 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
678 	size_t ssid_len;
679 	bool hidden_ssid;
680 	int txpower;
681 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
682 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
683 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
684 	u16 max_idle_period;
685 	bool protected_keep_alive;
686 	bool ftm_responder;
687 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
688 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
689 	bool nontransmitted;
690 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
691 	u8 bssid_index;
692 	u8 bssid_indicator;
693 	bool ema_ap;
694 	u8 profile_periodicity;
695 	struct {
696 		u32 params;
697 		u16 nss_set;
698 	} he_oper;
699 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
700 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
701 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
702 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
703 	bool s1g;
704 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
705 };
706 
707 /**
708  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
709  *
710  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
711  *
712  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
714  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
715  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
716  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
717  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
718  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
719  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
720  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
721  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
722  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
723  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
724  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
726  *	station
727  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
729  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
731  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
732  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
733  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
734  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
735  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
736  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
737  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
738  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
739  *	hardware queue.
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
741  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
742  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
743  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
744  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
745  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
746  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
747  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
748  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
749  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
750  *	off-channel operation.
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
752  *	(header conversion)
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
754  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
755  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
756  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
758  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
759  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
761  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
762  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
763  *	queue gets full.
764  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
765  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
766  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
767  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
768  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
769  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
770  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
771  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
772  *	status to user space)
773  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
775  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
776  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
777  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
778  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
779  *	handled properly by the device.
780  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
781  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
782  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
784  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
785  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
786  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
787  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
788  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
789  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
790  *	PS-Poll responses.
791  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
792  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
793  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
794  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
795  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
796  *	monitor injection).
797  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
798  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
799  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
800  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
801  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
802  *
803  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
804  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
805  */
806 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
807 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
808 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
809 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
810 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
811 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
812 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
818 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
819 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
820 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
821 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
822 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
823 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
832 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
838 };
839 
840 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
841 
842 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
843 
844 /**
845  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
846  *
847  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
848  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
849  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
850  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
853  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
856  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
857  *	it can be sent out.
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
859  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
860  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
861  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
862  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
863  *
864  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
865  */
866 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
867 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
868 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
869 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
870 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
872 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
873 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
874 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
875 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
876 };
877 
878 /*
879  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
880  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
881  */
882 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
883 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
884 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
885 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
886 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
887 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
888 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
889 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
890 
891 /**
892  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
893  *	Rate Control algorithm.
894  *
895  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
896  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
897  *
898  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
899  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
900  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
901  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
902  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
903  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
904  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
905  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
906  *	Greenfield mode.
907  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
908  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
909  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
910  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
911  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
912  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
913  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
914  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
915  */
916 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
917 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
918 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
919 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
920 
921 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
922 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
923 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
924 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
925 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
926 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
927 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
928 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
929 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
930 };
931 
932 
933 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
934 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
935 
936 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
937 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
938 
939 /* maximum number of rate stages */
940 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
941 
942 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
943 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
944 
945 /**
946  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
947  *
948  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
949  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
950  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
951  *
952  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
953  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
954  *
955  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
956  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
957  *
958  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
959  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
960  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
961  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
962  * information::
963  *
964  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
965  *
966  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
967  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
968  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
969  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
970  * information should then contain::
971  *
972  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
973  *
974  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
975  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
976  */
977 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
978 	s8 idx;
979 	u16 count:5,
980 	    flags:11;
981 } __packed;
982 
983 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
984 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)985 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
986 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
987 {
988 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
989 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
990 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
991 }
992 
993 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)994 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
995 {
996 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
997 }
998 
999 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1000 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1001 {
1002 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1003 }
1004 
1005 /**
1006  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1007  *
1008  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1009  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1010  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1011  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1012  *
1013  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1014  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1015  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1016  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1017  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1018  * @control: union part for control data
1019  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1020  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1021  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1022  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1023  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1024  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1025  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1026  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1027  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1028  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1029  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1030  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1031  * @pad: padding
1032  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1033  * @status: union part for status data
1034  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1035  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1036  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1037  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1038  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1039  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1040  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1041  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1042  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1043  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1044  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1045  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1046  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1047  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1048  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1049  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1050  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1051  */
1052 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1053 	/* common information */
1054 	u32 flags;
1055 	u32 band:3,
1056 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1057 	    hw_queue:4,
1058 	    tx_time_est:10;
1059 	/* 2 free bits */
1060 
1061 	union {
1062 		struct {
1063 			union {
1064 				/* rate control */
1065 				struct {
1066 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1067 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1068 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1069 					u8 use_rts:1;
1070 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1071 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1072 					u8 skip_table:1;
1073 					/* 2 bytes free */
1074 				};
1075 				/* only needed before rate control */
1076 				unsigned long jiffies;
1077 			};
1078 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1079 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1080 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1081 			u32 flags;
1082 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1083 		} control;
1084 		struct {
1085 			u64 cookie;
1086 		} ack;
1087 		struct {
1088 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1089 			s32 ack_signal;
1090 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1091 			u8 ampdu_len;
1092 			u8 antenna;
1093 			u16 tx_time;
1094 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1095 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1096 		} status;
1097 		struct {
1098 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1099 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1100 			u8 pad[4];
1101 
1102 			void *rate_driver_data[
1103 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1104 		};
1105 		void *driver_data[
1106 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1107 	};
1108 };
1109 
1110 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1111 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1112 {
1113 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1114 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1115 	 */
1116 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1117 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1118 }
1119 
1120 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1121 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1122 {
1123 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1124 }
1125 
1126 /**
1127  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1128  *
1129  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1130  * @info: Basic tx status information
1131  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1132  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1133  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1134  */
1135 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1136 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1137 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1138 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1139 	struct rate_info *rate;
1140 	struct list_head *free_list;
1141 };
1142 
1143 /**
1144  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1145  *
1146  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1147  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1148  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1149  *
1150  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1151  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1152  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1153  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1154  */
1155 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1156 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1157 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1158 	const u8 *common_ies;
1159 	size_t common_ie_len;
1160 };
1161 
1162 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1163 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1164 {
1165 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1166 }
1167 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1168 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1169 {
1170 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1171 }
1172 
1173 /**
1174  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1175  *
1176  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1177  *
1178  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1179  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1180  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1181  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1182  *
1183  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1184  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1185  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1186  */
1187 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1188 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1189 {
1190 	int i;
1191 
1192 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1193 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1194 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1195 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1196 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1197 	/* clear the rate counts */
1198 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1199 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1200 
1201 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1202 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1203 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1204 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1205 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1206 }
1207 
1208 
1209 /**
1210  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1211  *
1212  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1213  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1214  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1215  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1216  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1217  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1218  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1219  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1220  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1221  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1222  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1223  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1224  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1225  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1226  *	de-duplication by itself.
1227  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1228  *	the frame.
1229  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1230  *	the frame.
1231  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1232  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1233  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1234  *	merging.
1235  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1236  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1237  *	(including FCS) was received.
1238  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1239  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1240  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1241  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1242  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1243  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1244  *	each A-MPDU
1245  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1246  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1247  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1248  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1249  *	on this subframe
1250  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1251  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1252  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1253  *	done by the hardware
1254  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1255  *	processing it in any regular way.
1256  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1257  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1258  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1259  *	monitor interfaces.
1260  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1261  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1262  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1263  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1264  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1265  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1266  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1267  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1268  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1269  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1270  *	interleaved with other frames.
1271  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1272  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1273  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1274  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1275  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1276  *	the first subframe.
1277  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1278  *	be done in the hardware.
1279  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1280  *	frame
1281  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1282  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1283  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1284  *
1285  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1286  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1287  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1288  *	 - DATA5_GI
1289  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1290  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1291  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1292  *
1293  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1294  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1295  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1296  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1297  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1298  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1299  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1300  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1301  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1302  *	hardware or driver)
1303  */
1304 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1305 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1306 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1307 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1308 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1309 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1310 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1311 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1312 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1313 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1314 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1315 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1316 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1317 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1318 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1319 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1320 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1321 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1322 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1323 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1324 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1325 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1326 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1327 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1328 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1329 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1330 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1331 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1332 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1333 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1334 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1335 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1336 };
1337 
1338 /**
1339  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1340  *
1341  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1342  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1343  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1344  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1345  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1346  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1347  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1348  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1349  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1350  */
1351 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1352 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1353 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1354 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1355 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1356 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1357 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1358 };
1359 
1360 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1361 
1362 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1363 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1364 	RX_ENC_HT,
1365 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1366 	RX_ENC_HE,
1367 };
1368 
1369 /**
1370  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1371  *
1372  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1373  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1374  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1375  *
1376  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1377  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1378  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1379  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1380  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1381  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1382  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1383  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1384  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1385  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1386  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1387  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1388  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1389  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1390  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1391  *	values were filled.
1392  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1393  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1394  * @antenna: antenna used
1395  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1396  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1397  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1398  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1399  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1400  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1401  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1402  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1403  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1404  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1405  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1406  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1407  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1408  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1409  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1410  */
1411 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1412 	u64 mactime;
1413 	u64 boottime_ns;
1414 	u32 device_timestamp;
1415 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1416 	u32 flag;
1417 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1418 	u8 enc_flags;
1419 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1420 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1421 	u8 rate_idx;
1422 	u8 nss;
1423 	u8 rx_flags;
1424 	u8 band;
1425 	u8 antenna;
1426 	s8 signal;
1427 	u8 chains;
1428 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1429 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1430 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1431 };
1432 
1433 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1434 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1435 {
1436 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1437 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1438 }
1439 
1440 /**
1441  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1442  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1443  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1444  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1445  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1446  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1447  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1448  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1449  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1450  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1451  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1452  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1453  *	@data field.
1454  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1455  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1456  *	length
1457  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1458  *
1459  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1460  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1461  * data.
1462  */
1463 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1464 	u32 present;
1465 	u8 align;
1466 	u8 oui[3];
1467 	u8 subns;
1468 	u8 pad;
1469 	u16 len;
1470 	u8 data[];
1471 } __packed;
1472 
1473 /**
1474  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1475  *
1476  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1477  *
1478  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1479  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1480  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1481  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1482  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1483  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1484  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1485  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1486  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1487  *	for more.
1488  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1489  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1490  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1491  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1492  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1493  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1494  *	operating channel.
1495  */
1496 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1497 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1498 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1499 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1500 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1501 };
1502 
1503 
1504 /**
1505  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1506  *
1507  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1508  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1509  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1510  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1511  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1512  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1513  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1514  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1515  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1516  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1517  */
1518 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1519 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1520 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1521 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1522 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1523 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1524 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1525 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1526 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1527 };
1528 
1529 /**
1530  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1531  *
1532  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1533  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1534  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1535  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1536  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1537  */
1538 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1539 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1540 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1541 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1542 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1543 
1544 	/* keep last */
1545 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1546 };
1547 
1548 /**
1549  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1550  *
1551  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1552  *
1553  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1554  *
1555  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1556  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1557  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1558  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1559  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1560  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1561  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1562  *
1563  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1564  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1565  *
1566  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1567  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1568  *
1569  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1570  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1571  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1572  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1573  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1574  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1575  *
1576  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1577  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1578  *	configured for an HT channel.
1579  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1580  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1581  */
1582 struct ieee80211_conf {
1583 	u32 flags;
1584 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1585 
1586 	u16 listen_interval;
1587 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1588 
1589 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1590 
1591 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1592 	bool radar_enabled;
1593 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1594 };
1595 
1596 /**
1597  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1598  *
1599  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1600  * operation.
1601  *
1602  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1603  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1604  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1605  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1606  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1607  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1608  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1609  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1610  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1611  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1612  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1613   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1614   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1615  */
1616 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1617 	u64 timestamp;
1618 	u32 device_timestamp;
1619 	bool block_tx;
1620 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1621 	u8 count;
1622 	u32 delay;
1623 };
1624 
1625 /**
1626  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1627  *
1628  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1629  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1630  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1631  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1632  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1633  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1634  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1635  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1636  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1637  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1638  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1639  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1640  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1641  */
1642 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1643 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1644 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1645 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1646 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1647 };
1648 
1649 
1650 /**
1651  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1652  *
1653  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1654  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1655  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1656  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1657  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1658  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1659  *	mac80211.
1660  */
1661 
1662 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1663 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1664 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1665 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1666 };
1667 
1668 /**
1669  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1670  *
1671  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1672  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1673  *
1674  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1675  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1676  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1677  * @addr: address of this interface
1678  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1679  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1680  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1681  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1682  *	for read access.
1683  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1684  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1685  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1686  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1687  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1688  * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1689  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1690  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1691  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1692  *	restrictions.
1693  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1694  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1695  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1696  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1697  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1698  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1699  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1700  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1701  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1702  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1703  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1704  *	interface.
1705  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1706  *	for this interface.
1707  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1708  *	sizeof(void \*).
1709  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1710  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1711  *	protected by fq->lock.
1712  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1713  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1714  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
1715  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1716  *	for read access.
1717  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
1718  */
1719 struct ieee80211_vif {
1720 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1721 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1722 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1723 	bool p2p;
1724 	bool csa_active;
1725 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1726 
1727 	u8 cab_queue;
1728 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1729 
1730 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1731 
1732 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1733 
1734 	u32 driver_flags;
1735 	u32 offload_flags;
1736 
1737 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1738 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1739 #endif
1740 
1741 	bool probe_req_reg;
1742 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1743 
1744 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1745 
1746 	bool color_change_active;
1747 	u8 color_change_color;
1748 
1749 	/* must be last */
1750 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1751 };
1752 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1753 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1754 {
1755 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1756 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1757 #endif
1758 	return false;
1759 }
1760 
1761 /**
1762  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1763  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1764  *
1765  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1766  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1767  *
1768  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1769  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1770  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1771  */
1772 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1773 
1774 /**
1775  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1776  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1777  *
1778  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1779  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1780  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1781  */
1782 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1783 
1784 /**
1785  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1786  *
1787  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1788  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1789  *
1790  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1791  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1792  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1793  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1794  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1795  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1796  *	generation in software.
1797  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1798  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1799  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1800  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1801  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1802  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1803  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1804  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1805  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1806  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1807  *	MIC.
1808  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1809  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1810  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1811  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1812  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1813  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1814  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1815  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1816  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1817  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1818  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1819  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1820  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1821  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1822  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1823  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1824  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1825  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1826  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1827  *	generation only
1828  */
1829 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1830 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1831 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1832 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1833 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1834 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1835 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1836 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1837 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1838 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1839 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1840 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1841 };
1842 
1843 /**
1844  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1845  *
1846  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1847  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1848  *
1849  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1850  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1851  *	encrypted in hardware.
1852  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1853  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1854  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1855  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1856  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1857  * @keylen: key material length
1858  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1859  * 	data block:
1860  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1861  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1862  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1863  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1864  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1865  */
1866 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1867 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1868 	u32 cipher;
1869 	u8 icv_len;
1870 	u8 iv_len;
1871 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1872 	s8 keyidx;
1873 	u16 flags;
1874 	u8 keylen;
1875 	u8 key[];
1876 };
1877 
1878 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1879 
1880 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1881 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1882 
1883 /**
1884  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1885  *
1886  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1887  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1888  *	reverse order than in packet)
1889  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1890  *	reverse order than in packet)
1891  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1892  *	reverse order than in packet)
1893  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1894  *	reverse order than in packet)
1895  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1896  */
1897 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1898 	union {
1899 		struct {
1900 			u32 iv32;
1901 			u16 iv16;
1902 		} tkip;
1903 		struct {
1904 			u8 pn[6];
1905 		} ccmp;
1906 		struct {
1907 			u8 pn[6];
1908 		} aes_cmac;
1909 		struct {
1910 			u8 pn[6];
1911 		} aes_gmac;
1912 		struct {
1913 			u8 pn[6];
1914 		} gcmp;
1915 		struct {
1916 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1917 			u8 seq_len;
1918 		} hw;
1919 	};
1920 };
1921 
1922 /**
1923  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1924  *
1925  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1926  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1927  *
1928  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1929  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1930  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1931  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1932  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1933  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1934  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1935  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1936  *     key_idx value calculation:
1937  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1938  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1939  */
1940 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1941 	u32 cipher;
1942 	u16 iftype;
1943 	u8 hdr_len;
1944 	u8 pn_len;
1945 	u8 pn_off;
1946 	u8 key_idx_off;
1947 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1948 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1949 	u8 mic_len;
1950 };
1951 
1952 /**
1953  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1954  *
1955  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1956  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1957  *
1958  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1959  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1960  */
1961 enum set_key_cmd {
1962 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1963 };
1964 
1965 /**
1966  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1967  *
1968  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1969  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1970  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1971  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1972  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1973  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1974  */
1975 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1976 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1977 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1978 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1979 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1980 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1981 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1982 };
1983 
1984 /**
1985  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1986  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1987  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1988  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1989  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1990  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1991  *
1992  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1993  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1994  */
1995 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1996 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1997 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1998 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1999 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2000 };
2001 
2002 /**
2003  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2004  *
2005  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2006  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2007  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2008  */
2009 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2010 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2011 	struct {
2012 		s8 idx;
2013 		u8 count;
2014 		u8 count_cts;
2015 		u8 count_rts;
2016 		u16 flags;
2017 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2018 };
2019 
2020 /**
2021  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2022  *
2023  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2024  *
2025  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2026  *	to the STA.
2027  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2028  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2029  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2030  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2031  *	per peer TPC.
2032  */
2033 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2034 	s16 power;
2035 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2036 };
2037 
2038 /**
2039  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2040  *
2041  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2042  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2043  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2044  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2045  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2046  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2047  *
2048  * @addr: MAC address
2049  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2050  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2051  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2052  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2053  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2054  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2055  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2056  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2057  *	Can be modified by driver.
2058  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2059  *	otherwise always false)
2060  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2061  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2062  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2063  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2064  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2065  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2066  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2067  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2068  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2069  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2070  *	the station moves to associated state.
2071  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2072  * @rates: rate control selection table
2073  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2074  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2075  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2076  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2077  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2078  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2079  *	unlimited.
2080  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2081  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2082  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2083  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2084  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2085  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2086  */
2087 struct ieee80211_sta {
2088 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2089 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2090 	u16 aid;
2091 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2092 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2093 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2094 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2095 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2096 	bool wme;
2097 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2098 	u8 max_sp;
2099 	u8 rx_nss;
2100 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2101 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2102 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2103 	bool tdls;
2104 	bool tdls_initiator;
2105 	bool mfp;
2106 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2107 
2108 	/**
2109 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
2110 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2111 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2112 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2113 	 *
2114 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2115 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2116 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2117 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2118 	 *
2119 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2120 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2121 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2122 	 */
2123 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2124 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2125 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2126 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2127 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2128 
2129 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2130 
2131 	/* must be last */
2132 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2133 };
2134 
2135 /**
2136  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2137  *
2138  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2139  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2140  *
2141  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2142  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2143  */
2144 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2145 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2146 };
2147 
2148 /**
2149  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2150  *
2151  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2152  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2153  */
2154 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2155 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2156 };
2157 
2158 /**
2159  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2160  *
2161  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2162  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2163  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2164  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2165  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2166  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2167  *
2168  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2169  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2170  */
2171 struct ieee80211_txq {
2172 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2173 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2174 	u8 tid;
2175 	u8 ac;
2176 
2177 	/* must be last */
2178 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2179 };
2180 
2181 /**
2182  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2183  *
2184  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2185  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2186  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2187  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2188  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2189  *
2190  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2191  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2192  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2193  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2194  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2195  *	algorithm.
2196  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2197  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2198  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2199  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2200  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2201  *	CCK frames.
2202  *
2203  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2204  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2205  *	the FCS at the end.
2206  *
2207  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2208  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2209  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2210  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2211  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2212  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2213  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2214  *
2215  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2216  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2217  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2218  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2219  *
2220  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2221  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2222  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2223  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2224  *
2225  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2226  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2227  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2228  *
2229  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2230  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2231  *
2232  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2233  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2234  *
2235  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2236  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2237  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2240  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2241  *
2242  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2243  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2244  *
2245  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2246  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2247  *	the stack.
2248  *
2249  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2250  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2251  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2252  *
2253  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2254  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2255  *	dtim_period).
2256  *
2257  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2258  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2259  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2260  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2261  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2262  *	only in that case.
2263  *
2264  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2265  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2266  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2267  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2268  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2269  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2272  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2273  *	software.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2276  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2277  *	active interfaces.
2278  *
2279  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2280  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2281  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2284  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2285  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2286  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2287  *	supported cipher suites.
2288  *
2289  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2290  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2291  *	for frames.
2292  *
2293  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2294  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2295  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2296  *	control for more details.
2297  *
2298  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2299  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2300  *
2301  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2302  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2303  *	is supported.
2304  *
2305  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2306  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2307  *
2308  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2309  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2310  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2311  *
2312  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2313  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2314  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2315  *	CSA frame.
2316  *
2317  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2318  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2319  *
2320  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2321  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2322  *
2323  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2324  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2325  *
2326  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2327  *	within A-MPDU.
2328  *
2329  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2330  *	for sent beacons.
2331  *
2332  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2333  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2334  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2335  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2336  *
2337  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2338  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2339  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2340  *	timeout.
2341  *
2342  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2343  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2344  *
2345  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2346  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2347  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2348  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2349  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2350  *
2351  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2352  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2353  *
2354  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2355  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2356  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2357  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2358  *
2359  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2360  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2361  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2362  *
2363  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2364  *	TDLS links.
2365  *
2366  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2367  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2368  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2369  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2370  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2371  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2372  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2373  *
2374  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2375  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2376  *
2377  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2378  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2379  *
2380  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2381  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2382  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2383  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2384  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2385  *
2386  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2387  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2388  *	TXQs to start with.
2389  *
2390  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2391  *	length in tx status information
2392  *
2393  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2394  *
2395  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2396  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2397  *
2398  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2399  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2400  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2401  *
2402  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2403  *	offload
2404  *
2405  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2406  *	offload
2407  *
2408  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2409  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2410  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2411  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2412  *	the stack.
2413  *
2414  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2415  */
2416 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2417 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2418 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2419 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2420 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2421 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2422 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2423 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2424 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2425 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2426 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2427 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2428 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2429 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2430 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2431 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2432 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2433 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2434 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2435 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2436 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2437 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2438 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2439 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2440 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2441 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2442 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2443 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2444 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2445 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2446 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2447 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2448 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2449 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2450 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2451 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2452 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2453 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2454 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2455 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2456 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2457 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2458 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2459 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2460 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2461 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2462 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2463 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2464 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2465 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2466 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2467 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2468 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2469 
2470 	/* keep last, obviously */
2471 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2472 };
2473 
2474 /**
2475  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2476  *
2477  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2478  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2479  *
2480  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2481  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2482  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2483  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2484  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2485  *
2486  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2487  *
2488  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2489  *	along with this structure.
2490  *
2491  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2492  *
2493  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2494  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2495  *
2496  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2497  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2498  *
2499  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2500  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2501  *
2502  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2503  *	that HW supports
2504  *
2505  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2506  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2507  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2508  *
2509  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2510  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2511  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2512  *
2513  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2514  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2515  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2516  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2517  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2518  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2519  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2520  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2521  *
2522  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2523  *	can handle.
2524  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2525  *	the hw can report back.
2526  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2527  *
2528  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2529  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2530  *	aggregation.
2531  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2532  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2533  *	it shouldn't be set.
2534  *
2535  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2536  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2537  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2538  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2539  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2540  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2541  *
2542  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2543  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2544  *
2545  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2546  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2547  *
2548  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2549  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2550  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2551  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2552  *
2553  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2554  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2555  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2556  *
2557  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2558  *
2559  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2560  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2561  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2562  *	device_timestamp.
2563  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2564  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2565  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2566  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2567  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2568  *
2569  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2570  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2571  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2572  *
2573  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2574  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2575  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2576  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2577  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2578  *	neither enabled.
2579  *
2580  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2581  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2582  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2583  *
2584  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2585  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2586  *	supported by HW.
2587  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2588  *	device.
2589  *
2590  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2591  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2592  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2593  *
2594  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2595  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2596  *
2597  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2598  */
2599 struct ieee80211_hw {
2600 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2601 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2602 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2603 	void *priv;
2604 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2605 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2606 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2607 	int vif_data_size;
2608 	int sta_data_size;
2609 	int chanctx_data_size;
2610 	int txq_data_size;
2611 	u16 queues;
2612 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2613 	s8 max_signal;
2614 	u8 max_rates;
2615 	u8 max_report_rates;
2616 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2617 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2618 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2619 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2620 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2621 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2622 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2623 	struct {
2624 		int units_pos;
2625 		s16 accuracy;
2626 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2627 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2628 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2629 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2630 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2631 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2632 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2633 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2634 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2635 	u32 max_mtu;
2636 };
2637 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2638 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2639 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2640 {
2641 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2642 }
2643 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2644 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2645 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2646 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2647 {
2648 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2649 }
2650 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2651 
2652 /**
2653  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2654  *
2655  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2656  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2657  */
2658 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2659 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2660 
2661 	/* Keep last */
2662 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2663 };
2664 
2665 /**
2666  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2667  *
2668  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2669  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2670  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2671  * @status: channel-switch response status
2672  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2673  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2674  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2675  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2676  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2677  */
2678 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2679 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2680 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2681 	u8 action_code;
2682 	u32 status;
2683 	u32 timestamp;
2684 	u16 switch_time;
2685 	u16 switch_timeout;
2686 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2687 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2688 };
2689 
2690 /**
2691  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2692  *
2693  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2694  *
2695  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2696  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2697  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2698  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2699  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2700  *
2701  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2702  */
2703 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2704 
2705 /**
2706  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2707  *
2708  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2709  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2710  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2711 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2712 {
2713 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2714 }
2715 
2716 /**
2717  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2718  *
2719  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2720  * @addr: the address to set
2721  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2722 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2723 {
2724 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2725 }
2726 
2727 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2728 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2729 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2730 {
2731 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2732 		return NULL;
2733 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2734 }
2735 
2736 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2737 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2738 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2739 {
2740 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2741 		return NULL;
2742 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2743 }
2744 
2745 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2746 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2747 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2748 {
2749 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2750 		return NULL;
2751 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2752 }
2753 
2754 /**
2755  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2756  * @hw: the hardware
2757  * @skb: the skb
2758  *
2759  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2760  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2761  */
2762 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2763 
2764 /**
2765  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2766  *
2767  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2768  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2769  *
2770  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2771  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2772  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2773  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2774  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2775  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2776  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2777  *
2778  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2779  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2780  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2781  *
2782  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2783  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2784  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2785  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2786  *
2787  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2788  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2789  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2790  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2791  *
2792  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2793  *
2794  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2795  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2796  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2797  * based on the receive flags.
2798  *
2799  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2800  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2801  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2802  * keys.
2803  *
2804  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2805  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2806  * handler.
2807  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2808  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2809  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2810  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2811  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2812  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2813  *
2814  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2815  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2816  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2817  *
2818  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2819  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2820  * requirements:
2821  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
2822       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
2823    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2824       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2825    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2826       encrypted with the new key when also needing
2827       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
2828    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2829    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2830  */
2831 
2832 /**
2833  * DOC: Powersave support
2834  *
2835  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2836  *
2837  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2838  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2839  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2840  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2841  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2842  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2843  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2844  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2845  *
2846  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2847  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2848  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2849  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2850  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2851  *
2852  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2853  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2854  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2855  *
2856  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2857  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2858  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2859  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2860  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2861  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2862  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2863  *
2864  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2865  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2866  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2867  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2868  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2869  * periods.
2870  *
2871  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2872  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2873  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2874  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2875  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2876  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2877  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2878  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2879  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2880  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2881  *
2882  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2883  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2884  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2885  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2886  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2887  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2888  *
2889  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2890  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2891  */
2892 
2893 /**
2894  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2895  *
2896  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2897  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2898  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2899  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2900  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2901  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2902  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2903  *
2904  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2905  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2906  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2907  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2908  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2909  *
2910  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2911  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2912  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2913  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2914  *
2915  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2916  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2917  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2918  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2919  *
2920  *  - a list of information element IDs
2921  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2922  *
2923  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2924  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2925  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2926  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2927  * vendor information elements.
2928  *
2929  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2930  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2931  *
2932  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2933  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2934  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2935  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2936  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2937  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2938  *
2939  *
2940  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2941  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2942  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2943  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2944  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2945  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2946  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2947  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2948  *
2949  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2950  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2951  * signal strength threshold checking.
2952  */
2953 
2954 /**
2955  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2956  *
2957  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2958  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2959  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2960  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2961  *
2962  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2963  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2964  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2965  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2966  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2967  * hardware flags.
2968  *
2969  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2970  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2971  * turned off otherwise.
2972  *
2973  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2974  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2975  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2976  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2977  */
2978 
2979 /**
2980  * DOC: Frame filtering
2981  *
2982  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2983  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2984  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2985  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2986  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2987  *
2988  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2989  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2990  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2991  *
2992  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2993  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2994  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2995  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2996  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2997  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2998  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2999  *
3000  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3001  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3002  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3003  * or dropped.
3004  *
3005  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3006  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3007  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3008  * the flag, but not clear it.
3009  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3010  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3011  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3012  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3013  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3014  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3015  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3016  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3017  */
3018 
3019 /**
3020  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3021  *
3022  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3023  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3024  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3025  *
3026  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3027  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3028  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3029  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3030  * the driver code.
3031  *
3032  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3033  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3034  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3035  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3036  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3037  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3038  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3039  *
3040  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3041  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3042  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3043  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3044  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3045  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3046  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3047  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3048  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3049  * @sta_notify callback.
3050  *
3051  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3052  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3053  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3054  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3055  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3056  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3057  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3058  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3059  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3060  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3061  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3062  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3063  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3064  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3065  *
3066  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3067  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3068  *
3069  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3070  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3071  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3072  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3073  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3074  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3075  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3076  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3077  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3078  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3079  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3080  *
3081  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3082  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3083  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3084  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3085  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3086  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3087  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3088  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3089  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3090  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3091  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3092  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3093  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3094  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3095  *
3096  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3097  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3098  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3099  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3100  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3101  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3102  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3103  *
3104  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3105  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3106  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3107  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3108  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3109  *
3110  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3111  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3112  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3113  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3114  */
3115 
3116 /**
3117  * DOC: HW queue control
3118  *
3119  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3120  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3121  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3122  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3123  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3124  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3125  *
3126  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3127  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3128  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3129  *
3130  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3131  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3132  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3133  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3134  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3135  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3136  * the hardware queue.
3137  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3138  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3139  *
3140  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3141  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3142  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3143  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3144  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3145  *
3146  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3147  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3148  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3149  * off-channel queue:         9
3150  *
3151  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3152  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3153  *
3154  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3155  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3156  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3157  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3158  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3159  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3160  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3161  *
3162  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3163  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3164  *
3165  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3166  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3167  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3168  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3169  */
3170 
3171 /**
3172  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3173  *
3174  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3175  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3176  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3177  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3178  *
3179  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3180  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3181  *	multicast address.
3182  *
3183  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3184  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3185  *
3186  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3187  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3188  *
3189  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3190  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3191  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3192  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3193  *	honour this flag if possible.
3194  *
3195  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3196  *	station
3197  *
3198  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3199  *
3200  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3201  *
3202  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3203  *
3204  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3205  */
3206 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3207 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3208 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3209 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3210 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3211 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3212 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3213 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3214 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3215 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3216 };
3217 
3218 /**
3219  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3220  *
3221  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3222  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3223  *
3224  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3225  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3226  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3227  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3228  *
3229  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3230  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3231  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3232  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3233  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3234  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3235  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3236  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3237  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3238  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3239  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3240  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3241  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3242  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3243  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3244  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3245  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3246  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3247  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3248  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3249  */
3250 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3251 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3252 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3253 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3254 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3255 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3256 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3257 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3258 };
3259 
3260 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3261 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3262 
3263 /**
3264  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3265  *
3266  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3267  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3268  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3269  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3270  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3271  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3272  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3273  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3274  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3275  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3276  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3277  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3278  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3279  */
3280 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3281 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3282 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3283 	u16 tid;
3284 	u16 ssn;
3285 	u16 buf_size;
3286 	bool amsdu;
3287 	u16 timeout;
3288 };
3289 
3290 /**
3291  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3292  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3293  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3294  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3295  */
3296 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3297 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3298 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3299 };
3300 
3301 /**
3302  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3303  *
3304  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3305  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3306  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3307  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3308  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3309  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3310  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3311  *	the peer.
3312  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3313  *	by the peer
3314  */
3315 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3316 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3317 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3318 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3319 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3320 };
3321 
3322 /**
3323  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3324  *
3325  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3326  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3327  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3328  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3329  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3330  *
3331  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3332  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3333  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3334  */
3335 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3336 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3337 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3338 };
3339 
3340 /**
3341  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3342  *
3343  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3344  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3345  *
3346  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3347  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3348  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3349  *	of wowlan configuration)
3350  */
3351 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3352 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3353 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3354 };
3355 
3356 /**
3357  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3358  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3359  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3360  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3361  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3362  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3363  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3364  */
3365 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3366 	u16 duration;
3367 	u16 subtype;
3368 	u8 success:1;
3369 };
3370 
3371 /**
3372  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3373  *
3374  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3375  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3376  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3377  *
3378  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3379  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3380  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3381  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3382  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3383  *	Must be atomic.
3384  *
3385  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3386  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3387  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3388  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3389  *	or zero.
3390  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3391  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3392  *	is added.
3393  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3394  *
3395  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3396  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3397  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3398  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3399  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3400  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3401  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3402  *
3403  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3404  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3405  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3406  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3407  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3408  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3409  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3410  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3411  *	must return 1 from this function.
3412  *
3413  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3414  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3415  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3416  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3417  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3418  *
3419  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3420  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3421  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3422  *	in suspend().
3423  *
3424  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3425  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3426  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3427  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3428  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3429  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3430  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3431  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3432  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3433  *
3434  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3435  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3436  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3437  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3438  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3439  *
3440  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3441  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3442  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3443  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3444  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3445  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3446  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3447  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3448  *
3449  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3450  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3451  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3452  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3453  *
3454  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3455  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3456  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3457  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3458  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3459  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3460  *	can sleep.
3461  *
3462  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3463  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3464  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3465  *
3466  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3467  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3468  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3469  *
3470  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3471  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3472  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3473  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3474  *	which flags are changed.
3475  *	This callback can sleep.
3476  *
3477  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3478  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3479  *
3480  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3481  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3482  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3483  *	is enabled.
3484  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3485  *	The callback can sleep.
3486  *
3487  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3488  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3489  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3490  *	The callback must be atomic.
3491  *
3492  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3493  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3494  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3495  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3496  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3497  *
3498  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3499  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3500  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3501  *
3502  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3503  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3504  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3505  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3506  *	that power save is disabled.
3507  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3508  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3509  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3510  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3511  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3512  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3513  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3514  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3515  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3516  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3517  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3518  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3519  *	The callback can sleep.
3520  *
3521  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3522  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3523  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3524  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3525  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3526  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3527  *	The callback can sleep.
3528  *
3529  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3530  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3531  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3532  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3533  *
3534  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3535  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3536  *
3537  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3538  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3539  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3540  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3541  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3542  *
3543  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3544  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3545  *	this notification.
3546  *	The callback can sleep.
3547  *
3548  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3549  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3550  *	The callback can sleep.
3551  *
3552  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3553  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3554  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3555  *	The callback must be atomic.
3556  *
3557  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3558  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3559  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3560  *	should be set as well.
3561  *	The callback can sleep.
3562  *
3563  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3564  *	The callback can sleep.
3565  *
3566  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3567  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3568  *
3569  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3570  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3571  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3572  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3573  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3574  *	This callback can sleep.
3575  *
3576  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3577  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3578  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3579  *	callback can sleep.
3580  *
3581  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3582  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3583  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3584  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3585  *
3586  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3587  *	power for the station.
3588  *	This callback can sleep.
3589  *
3590  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3591  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3592  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3593  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3594  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3595  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3596  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3597  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3598  *	The callback can sleep.
3599  *
3600  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3601  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3602  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3603  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3604  *	in @sta_state.
3605  *	The callback can sleep.
3606  *
3607  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3608  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3609  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3610  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3611  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3612  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3613  *	Must be atomic.
3614  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3615  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3616  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3617  *
3618  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3619  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3620  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3621  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3622  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3623  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3624  *	The callback can sleep.
3625  *
3626  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3627  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3628  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3629  *	The callback can sleep.
3630  *
3631  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3632  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3633  *	required function.
3634  *	The callback can sleep.
3635  *
3636  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3637  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3638  *	required function.
3639  *	The callback can sleep.
3640  *
3641  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3642  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3643  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3644  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3645  *	The callback can sleep.
3646  *
3647  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3648  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3649  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3650  *	TSF synchronization.
3651  *	The callback can sleep.
3652  *
3653  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3654  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3655  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3656  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3657  *	The callback can sleep.
3658  *
3659  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3660  *
3661  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3662  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3663  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3664  *	The callback can sleep.
3665  *
3666  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3667  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3668  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3669  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3670  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3671  *
3672  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3673  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3674  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3675  *
3676  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3677  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3678  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3679  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3680  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3681  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3682  *	The callback can sleep.
3683  *
3684  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3685  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3686  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3687  *	completion of the channel switch.
3688  *
3689  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3690  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3691  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3692  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3693  *
3694  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3695  *
3696  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3697  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3698  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3699  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3700  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3701  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3702  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3703  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3704  *	must be accepted in this case.
3705  *	This callback may sleep.
3706  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3707  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3708  *
3709  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3710  *
3711  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3712  *
3713  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3714  *	queues before entering power save.
3715  *
3716  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3717  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3718  *	The callback can sleep.
3719  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3720  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3721  *	The callback must be atomic.
3722  *
3723  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3724  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3725  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3726  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3727  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3728  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3729  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3730  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3731  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3732  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3733  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3734  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3735  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3736  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3737  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3738  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3739  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3740  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3741  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3742  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3743  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3744  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3745  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3746  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3747  *	This callback must be atomic.
3748  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3749  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3750  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3751  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3752  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3753  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3754  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3755  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3756  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3757  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3758  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3759  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3760  *	This callback must be atomic.
3761  *
3762  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3763  *
3764  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3765  *
3766  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3767  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3768  *
3769  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3770  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3771  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3772  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3773  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3774  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3775  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3776  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3777  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3778  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3779  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3780  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3781  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3782  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3783  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
3784  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
3785  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
3786  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3787  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
3788  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
3789  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
3790  *
3791  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3792  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3793  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3794  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3795  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3796  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3797  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3798  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3799  *
3800  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3801  *	This callback may sleep.
3802  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3803  *	This callback may sleep.
3804  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3805  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3806  *	channel context with different settings
3807  *	This callback may sleep.
3808  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3809  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3810  *	This callback may sleep.
3811  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3812  *	unbound from vif.
3813  *	This callback may sleep.
3814  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3815  *	another, as specified in the list of
3816  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3817  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3818  *	This callback may sleep.
3819  *
3820  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3821  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3822  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3823  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3824  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3825  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3826  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3827  *
3828  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3829  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3830  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3831  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3832  *	This callback may sleep.
3833  *
3834  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3835  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3836  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3837  *
3838  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3839  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3840  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3841  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3842  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3843  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3844  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3845  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3846  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3847  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3848  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3849  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3850  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3851  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3852  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3853  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3854  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3855  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3856  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3857  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3858  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3859  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3860  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3861  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3862  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3863  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3864  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3865  *
3866  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3867  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3868  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3869  *
3870  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3871  *	and hardware limits.
3872  *
3873  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3874  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3875  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3876  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3877  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3878  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3879  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3880  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3881  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3882  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3883  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3884  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3885  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3886  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3887  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3888  *	the function call.
3889  *
3890  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3891  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3892  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3893  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3894  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3895  *
3896  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3897  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3898  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3899  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3900  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3901  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3902  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3903  *	changed parameters.
3904  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3905  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3906  *	this call.
3907  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3908  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3909  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3910  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3911  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3912  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3913  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3914  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3915  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3916  *
3917  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3918  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3919  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3920  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3921  *	This callback may sleep.
3922  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3923  *	This callback may sleep.
3924  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3925  *	4-address mode
3926  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
3927  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
3928  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
3929  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
3930  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
3931  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
3932  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
3933  *	twt structure.
3934  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
3935  *	from the peer.
3936  */
3937 struct ieee80211_ops {
3938 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3939 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3940 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3941 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3942 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3943 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3944 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3945 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3946 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3947 #endif
3948 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3950 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3951 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3952 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3953 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3955 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3956 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3958 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3959 				 u32 changed);
3960 
3961 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3962 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3963 
3964 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3966 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3967 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3968 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3969 				 u64 multicast);
3970 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3972 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3973 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3974 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3975 		       bool set);
3976 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3977 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3978 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3979 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3980 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3981 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3982 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3983 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3984 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3987 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3989 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3990 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3991 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3993 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3994 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3995 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3996 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3997 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3998 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3999 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4002 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4004 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4005 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4006 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4007 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4008 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4009 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4010 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4011 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4013 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4014 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4015 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4016 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4019 				struct dentry *dir);
4020 #endif
4021 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4022 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4023 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4024 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4025 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4026 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4027 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4028 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4029 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4030 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4031 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4032 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4033 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4034 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4035 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4036 			      u32 changed);
4037 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4040 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4043 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4044 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4046 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4047 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4048 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4049 			u64 tsf);
4050 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4051 			   s64 offset);
4052 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4053 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4054 
4055 	/**
4056 	 * @ampdu_action:
4057 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4058 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4059 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4060 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4061 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4062 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4063 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4064 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4065 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4066 	 *
4067 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4068 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4069 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4070 	 *
4071 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4072 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4073 	 *
4074 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4075 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4076 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4077 	 *
4078 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4079 	 *
4080 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4081 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4082 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4083 	 *
4084 	 * The callback can sleep.
4085 	 */
4086 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4089 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4090 		struct survey_info *survey);
4091 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4092 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4093 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4094 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4095 			    void *data, int len);
4096 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4097 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4098 			     void *data, int len);
4099 #endif
4100 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4102 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4104 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4105 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4106 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4107 
4108 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4109 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4110 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4111 				 int duration,
4112 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4113 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4114 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4115 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4116 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4117 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4118 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4119 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4120 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4121 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4122 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4123 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4124 
4125 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4126 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4127 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4128 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4129 				      bool more_data);
4130 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4131 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4132 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4133 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4134 					bool more_data);
4135 
4136 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4137 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4138 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4139 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4140 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4141 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4142 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4143 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4144 
4145 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4146 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4147 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4148 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4149 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4150 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4151 
4152 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4153 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4154 
4155 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4156 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4157 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4158 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4159 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4160 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4161 			       u32 changed);
4162 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4163 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4164 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4165 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4166 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4167 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4168 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4169 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4170 				  int n_vifs,
4171 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4172 
4173 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4174 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4175 
4176 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4177 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4179 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4180 #endif
4181 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4184 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4186 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4187 
4188 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4190 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4191 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4192 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4193 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4194 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4195 
4196 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4197 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4198 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4200 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4201 			   int *dbm);
4202 
4203 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4206 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4207 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4208 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4209 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4210 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4211 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4212 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4213 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4214 
4215 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4217 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4218 
4219 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4220 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4221 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4222 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4224 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4225 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4226 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4227 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4228 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4229 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4230 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4231 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4232 			    u8 instance_id);
4233 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4234 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4235 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4236 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4237 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4238 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4239 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4240 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4241 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4242 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4243 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4244 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4245 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4246 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4247 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4248 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4249 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4250 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4251 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4252 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4253 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4254 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4255 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4256 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4258 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4259 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4260 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4261 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4262 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4263 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4264 };
4265 
4266 /**
4267  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4268  *
4269  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4270  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4271  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4272  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4273  * @priv_data_len.
4274  *
4275  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4276  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4277  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4278  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4279  *
4280  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4281  */
4282 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4283 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4284 					   const char *requested_name);
4285 
4286 /**
4287  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4288  *
4289  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4290  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4291  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4292  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4293  * @priv_data_len.
4294  *
4295  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4296  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4297  *
4298  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4299  */
4300 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4301 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4302 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4303 {
4304 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4305 }
4306 
4307 /**
4308  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4309  *
4310  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4311  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4312  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4313  *
4314  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4315  *
4316  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4317  */
4318 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4319 
4320 /**
4321  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4322  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4323  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4324  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4325  */
4326 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4327 	int throughput;
4328 	int blink_time;
4329 };
4330 
4331 /**
4332  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4333  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4334  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4335  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4336  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4337  */
4338 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4339 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4340 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4341 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4342 };
4343 
4344 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4345 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4346 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4347 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4348 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4349 const char *
4350 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4351 				   unsigned int flags,
4352 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4353 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4354 #endif
4355 /**
4356  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4357  *
4358  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4359  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4360  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4361  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4362  *
4363  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4364  *
4365  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4366  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4367 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4368 {
4369 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4370 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4371 #else
4372 	return NULL;
4373 #endif
4374 }
4375 
4376 /**
4377  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4378  *
4379  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4380  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4381  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4382  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4383  *
4384  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4385  *
4386  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4387  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4388 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4389 {
4390 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4391 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4392 #else
4393 	return NULL;
4394 #endif
4395 }
4396 
4397 /**
4398  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4399  *
4400  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4401  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4402  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4403  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4404  *
4405  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4406  *
4407  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4408  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4409 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4410 {
4411 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4412 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4413 #else
4414 	return NULL;
4415 #endif
4416 }
4417 
4418 /**
4419  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4420  *
4421  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4422  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4423  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4424  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4425  *
4426  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4427  *
4428  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4429  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4430 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4431 {
4432 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4433 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4434 #else
4435 	return NULL;
4436 #endif
4437 }
4438 
4439 /**
4440  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4441  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4442  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4443  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4444  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4445  *
4446  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4447  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4448  *
4449  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4450  */
4451 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4452 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4453 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4454 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4455 {
4456 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4457 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4458 						  blink_table_len);
4459 #else
4460 	return NULL;
4461 #endif
4462 }
4463 
4464 /**
4465  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4466  *
4467  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4468  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4469  *
4470  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4471  */
4472 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4473 
4474 /**
4475  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4476  *
4477  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4478  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4479  * before calling this function.
4480  *
4481  * @hw: the hardware to free
4482  */
4483 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4484 
4485 /**
4486  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4487  *
4488  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4489  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4490  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4491  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4492  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4493  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4494  *
4495  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4496  */
4497 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4498 
4499 /**
4500  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4501  *
4502  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4503  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4504  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4505  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4506  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4507  *
4508  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4509  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4510  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4511  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4512  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4513  *
4514  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4515  *
4516  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4517  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4518  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4519  * @list: the destination list
4520  */
4521 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4522 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4523 
4524 /**
4525  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4526  *
4527  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4528  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4529  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4530  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4531  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4532  *
4533  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4534  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4535  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4536  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4537  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4538  *
4539  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4540  *
4541  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4542  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4543  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4544  * @napi: the NAPI context
4545  */
4546 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4547 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4548 
4549 /**
4550  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4551  *
4552  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4553  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4554  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4555  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4556  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4557  *
4558  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4559  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4560  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4561  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4562  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4563  *
4564  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4565  *
4566  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4567  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4568  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4569 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4570 {
4571 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4572 }
4573 
4574 /**
4575  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4576  *
4577  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4578  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4579  *
4580  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4581  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4582  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4583  *
4584  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4585  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4586  */
4587 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4588 
4589 /**
4590  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4591  *
4592  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4593  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4594  *
4595  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4596  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4597  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4598  *
4599  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4600  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4601  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4602 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4604 {
4605 	local_bh_disable();
4606 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4607 	local_bh_enable();
4608 }
4609 
4610 /**
4611  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4612  *
4613  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4614  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4615  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4616  *
4617  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4618  *
4619  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4620  * each other.
4621  *
4622  * @sta: currently connected sta
4623  * @start: start or stop PS
4624  *
4625  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4626  */
4627 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4628 
4629 /**
4630  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4631  *                                  (in process context)
4632  *
4633  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4634  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4635  * applies.
4636  *
4637  * @sta: currently connected sta
4638  * @start: start or stop PS
4639  *
4640  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4641  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4642 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4643 						  bool start)
4644 {
4645 	int ret;
4646 
4647 	local_bh_disable();
4648 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4649 	local_bh_enable();
4650 
4651 	return ret;
4652 }
4653 
4654 /**
4655  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4656  * @sta: currently connected station
4657  *
4658  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4659  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4660  * connected station was received.
4661  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4662  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4663  * be serialized.
4664  */
4665 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4666 
4667 /**
4668  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4669  * @sta: currently connected station
4670  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4671  *
4672  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4673  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4674  * from a connected station was received.
4675  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4676  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4677  * serialized.
4678  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4679  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4680  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4681  * checks.
4682  */
4683 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4684 
4685 /*
4686  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4687  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4688  */
4689 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4690 
4691 /**
4692  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4693  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4694  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4695  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4696  *
4697  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4698  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4699  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4700  *
4701  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4702  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4703  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4704  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4705  *
4706  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4707  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4708  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4709  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4710  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4711  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4712  *
4713  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4714  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4715  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4716  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4717  * use this API.
4718  */
4719 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4720 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4721 
4722 /**
4723  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4724  *
4725  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4726  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4727  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4728  *
4729  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4730  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4731  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4732  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4733  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4734  */
4735 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4736 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4737 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4738 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4739 			    int max_rates);
4740 
4741 /**
4742  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4743  *
4744  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4745  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4746  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4747  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4748  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4749  * slow stations to starve).
4750  *
4751  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4752  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4753  */
4754 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4755 					   u32 thr);
4756 
4757 /**
4758  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4759  *
4760  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4761  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4762  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4763  *
4764  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4765  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4766  * @info: tx status information
4767  */
4768 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4769 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4770 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4771 
4772 /**
4773  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4774  *
4775  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4776  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4777  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4778  *
4779  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4780  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4781  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4782  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4783  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4784  *
4785  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4786  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4787  */
4788 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4789 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4790 
4791 /**
4792  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4793  *
4794  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4795  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4796  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4797  *
4798  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4799  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4800  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4801  *
4802  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4803  * @status: tx status information
4804  */
4805 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4806 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4807 
4808 /**
4809  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4810  *
4811  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4812  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4813  * specific skbs.
4814  *
4815  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4816  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4817  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4818  *
4819  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4820  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4821  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4822  * @info: tx status information
4823  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4824 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4825 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4826 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4827 {
4828 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4829 		.sta = sta,
4830 		.info = info,
4831 	};
4832 
4833 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4834 }
4835 
4836 /**
4837  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4838  *
4839  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4840  *
4841  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4842  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4843  * for a single hardware.
4844  *
4845  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4846  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4847  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4848 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4849 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4850 {
4851 	local_bh_disable();
4852 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4853 	local_bh_enable();
4854 }
4855 
4856 /**
4857  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4858  *
4859  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4860  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4861  *
4862  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4863  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4864  *
4865  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4866  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4867  */
4868 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4869 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4870 
4871 /**
4872  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4873  *
4874  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4875  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4876  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4877  * 802.11 frames.
4878  *
4879  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4880  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4881  * calls in the same tx status family.
4882  *
4883  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4884  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4885  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4886  */
4887 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4888 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4889 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
4890 
4891 /**
4892  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4893  *
4894  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4895  * connected STA.
4896  *
4897  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4898  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4899  */
4900 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4901 
4902 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4903 
4904 /**
4905  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4906  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4907  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4908  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4909  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4910  *	should be ignored.
4911  */
4912 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4913 	u16 tim_offset;
4914 	u16 tim_length;
4915 
4916 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4917 };
4918 
4919 /**
4920  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4921  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4922  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4923  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4924  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4925  *
4926  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4927  * obtain the beacon template.
4928  *
4929  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4930  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4931  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4932  * applicable, the CSA count.
4933  *
4934  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4935  *
4936  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4937  */
4938 struct sk_buff *
4939 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4940 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4941 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4942 
4943 /**
4944  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4945  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4946  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4947  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4948  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4949  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4950  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4951  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4952  *
4953  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4954  * obtain the beacon frame.
4955  *
4956  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4957  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4958  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4959  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4960  *
4961  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4962  *
4963  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4964  */
4965 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4966 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4967 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4968 
4969 /**
4970  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4971  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4972  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4973  *
4974  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4975  *
4976  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4977  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4978 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4979 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4980 {
4981 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4982 }
4983 
4984 /**
4985  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4986  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4987  *
4988  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4989  * This function is called implicitly when
4990  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4991  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4992  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4993  *
4994  * Return: new countdown value
4995  */
4996 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4997 
4998 /**
4999  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5000  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5001  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5002  *
5003  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5004  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5005  *
5006  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5007  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5008  */
5009 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5010 
5011 /**
5012  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5013  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5014  *
5015  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5016  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5017  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5018  */
5019 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5020 
5021 /**
5022  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5023  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5024  *
5025  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5026  */
5027 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5028 
5029 /**
5030  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5031  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5032  *
5033  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5034  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5035  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5036  */
5037 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5038 
5039 /**
5040  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5041  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5042  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5043  *
5044  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5045  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5046  *
5047  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5048  *
5049  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5050  */
5051 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5052 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5053 
5054 /**
5055  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5056  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5057  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5058  *
5059  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5060  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5061  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5062  *
5063  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5064  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5065  *
5066  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5067  */
5068 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5069 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5070 
5071 /**
5072  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5073  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5074  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5075  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5076  *	if at all possible
5077  *
5078  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5079  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5080  * BSSID and address is used.
5081  *
5082  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5083  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5084  *
5085  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5086  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5087  *
5088  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5089  */
5090 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5091 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5092 				       bool qos_ok);
5093 
5094 /**
5095  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5096  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5097  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5098  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5099  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5100  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5101  *
5102  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5103  * hardware.
5104  *
5105  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5106  */
5107 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5108 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5109 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5110 				       size_t tailroom);
5111 
5112 /**
5113  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5114  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5115  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5116  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5117  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5118  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5119  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5120  *
5121  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5122  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5123  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5124  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5125  */
5126 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5127 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5128 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5129 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5130 
5131 /**
5132  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5133  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5134  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5135  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5136  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5137  *
5138  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5139  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5140  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5141  *
5142  * Return: The duration.
5143  */
5144 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5145 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5146 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5147 
5148 /**
5149  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5150  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5151  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5152  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5153  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5154  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5155  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5156  *
5157  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5158  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5159  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5160  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5161  */
5162 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5163 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5164 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5165 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5166 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5167 
5168 /**
5169  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5170  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5171  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5172  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5173  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5174  *
5175  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5176  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5177  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5178  *
5179  * Return: The duration.
5180  */
5181 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5182 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5183 				    size_t frame_len,
5184 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5185 
5186 /**
5187  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5188  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5189  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5190  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5191  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5192  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5193  *
5194  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5195  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5196  *
5197  * Return: The duration.
5198  */
5199 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5200 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5201 					enum nl80211_band band,
5202 					size_t frame_len,
5203 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5204 
5205 /**
5206  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5207  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5208  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5209  *
5210  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5211  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5212  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5213  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5214  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5215  *
5216  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5217  * frames are available.
5218  *
5219  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5220  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5221  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5222  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5223  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5224  * use common code for all beacons.
5225  */
5226 struct sk_buff *
5227 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5228 
5229 /**
5230  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5231  *
5232  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5233  *
5234  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5235  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5236  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5237  */
5238 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5239 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5240 
5241 /**
5242  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5243  *
5244  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5245  * from the given packet.
5246  *
5247  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5248  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5249  *	with this P1K
5250  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5251  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5252 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5253 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5254 {
5255 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5256 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5257 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5258 
5259 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5260 }
5261 
5262 /**
5263  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5264  *
5265  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5266  * and transmitter address.
5267  *
5268  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5269  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5270  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5271  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5272  */
5273 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5274 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5275 
5276 /**
5277  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5278  *
5279  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5280  * in the packet.
5281  *
5282  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5283  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5284  *	encrypted with this key
5285  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5286  */
5287 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5288 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5289 
5290 /**
5291  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5292  *
5293  * @pos: start of crypto header
5294  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5295  * @pn: PN to add
5296  *
5297  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5298  * the packet payload)
5299  *
5300  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5301  * point to the crypto header)
5302  */
5303 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5304 
5305 /**
5306  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5307  *
5308  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5309  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5310  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5311  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5312  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5313  *
5314  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5315  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5316  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5317  *
5318  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5319  * can be done concurrently.
5320  */
5321 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5322 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5323 
5324 /**
5325  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5326  *
5327  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5328  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5329  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5330  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5331  * @seq: new sequence data
5332  *
5333  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5334  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5335  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5336  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5337  *
5338  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5339  * can be done concurrently.
5340  */
5341 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5342 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5343 
5344 /**
5345  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5346  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5347  *
5348  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5349  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5350  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5351  *
5352  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5353  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5354  */
5355 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5356 
5357 /**
5358  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5359  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5360  * @keyconf: new key data
5361  *
5362  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5363  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5364  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5365  *
5366  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5367  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5368  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5369  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5370  *
5371  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5372  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5373  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5374  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5375  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5376  * of the reconfiguration.
5377  *
5378  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5379  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5380  *
5381  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5382  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5383  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5384  * the key that's being replaced.
5385  */
5386 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5387 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5388 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5389 
5390 /**
5391  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5392  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5393  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5394  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5395  * @gfp: allocation flags
5396  */
5397 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5398 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5399 
5400 /**
5401  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5402  *
5403  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5404  * at the same time.
5405  *
5406  * @keyconf: the key in question
5407  */
5408 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5409 
5410 /**
5411  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5412  *
5413  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5414  * at the same time.
5415  *
5416  * @keyconf: the key in question
5417  */
5418 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5419 
5420 /**
5421  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5422  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5423  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5424  *
5425  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5426  */
5427 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5428 
5429 /**
5430  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5431  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5432  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5433  *
5434  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5435  */
5436 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5437 
5438 /**
5439  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5440  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5441  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5442  *
5443  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5444  *
5445  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5446  */
5447 
5448 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5449 
5450 /**
5451  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5452  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5453  *
5454  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5455  */
5456 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5457 
5458 /**
5459  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5460  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5461  *
5462  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5463  */
5464 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5465 
5466 /**
5467  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5468  *
5469  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5470  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5471  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5472  * any context, including hardirq context.
5473  *
5474  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5475  * @info: information about the completed scan
5476  */
5477 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5478 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5479 
5480 /**
5481  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5482  *
5483  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5484  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5485  *
5486  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5487  */
5488 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5489 
5490 /**
5491  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5492  *
5493  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5494  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5495  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5496  * while associating, for instance.
5497  *
5498  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5499  */
5500 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5501 
5502 /**
5503  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5504  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5505  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5506  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5507  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5508  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5509  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5510  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5511  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5512  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5513  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5514  *	for instance.
5515  */
5516 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5517 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5518 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5519 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5520 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5521 };
5522 
5523 /**
5524  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5525  *
5526  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5527  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5528  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5529  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5530  *
5531  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5532  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5533  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5534  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5535  */
5536 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5537 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5538 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5539 				  void *data);
5540 
5541 /**
5542  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5543  *
5544  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5545  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5546  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5547  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5548  * be used.
5549  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5550  *
5551  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5552  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5553  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5554  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5555  */
5556 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5557 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5558 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5559 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5560 				    void *data)
5561 {
5562 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5563 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5564 				     iterator, data);
5565 }
5566 
5567 /**
5568  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5569  *
5570  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5571  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5572  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5573  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5574  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5575  *
5576  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5577  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5578  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5579  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5580  */
5581 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5582 						u32 iter_flags,
5583 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5584 						    u8 *mac,
5585 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5586 						void *data);
5587 
5588 /**
5589  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5590  *
5591  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5592  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5593  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5594  *
5595  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5596  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5597  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5598  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5599  */
5600 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5601 					     u32 iter_flags,
5602 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5603 						u8 *mac,
5604 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5605 					     void *data);
5606 
5607 /**
5608  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5609  *
5610  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5611  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5612  * function for them.
5613  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5614  *
5615  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5616  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5617  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5618  */
5619 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5620 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5621 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5622 				       void *data);
5623 /**
5624  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5625  *
5626  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5627  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5628  *
5629  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5630  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5631  */
5632 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5633 
5634 /**
5635  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5636  *
5637  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5638  * workqueue.
5639  *
5640  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5641  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5642  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5643  */
5644 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5645 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5646 				  unsigned long delay);
5647 
5648 /**
5649  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5650  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5651  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5652  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5653  *
5654  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5655  *
5656  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5657  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5658  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5659  */
5660 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5661 				  u16 timeout);
5662 
5663 /**
5664  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5665  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5666  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5667  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5668  *
5669  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5670  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5671  * from any context.
5672  */
5673 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5674 				      u16 tid);
5675 
5676 /**
5677  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5678  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5679  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5680  *
5681  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5682  *
5683  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5684  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5685  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5686  */
5687 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5688 
5689 /**
5690  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5691  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5692  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5693  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5694  *
5695  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5696  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5697  * can be called from any context.
5698  */
5699 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5700 				     u16 tid);
5701 
5702 /**
5703  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5704  *
5705  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5706  * @addr: station's address
5707  *
5708  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5709  *
5710  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5711  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5712  */
5713 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5714 					 const u8 *addr);
5715 
5716 /**
5717  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5718  *
5719  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5720  * @addr: remote station's address
5721  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5722  *
5723  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5724  *
5725  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5726  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5727  *
5728  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5729  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5730  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5731  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5732  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5733  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5734  *      is not reliable.
5735  *
5736  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5737  */
5738 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5739 					       const u8 *addr,
5740 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5741 
5742 /**
5743  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5744  * @hw: the hardware
5745  * @pubsta: the station
5746  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5747  *
5748  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5749  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5750  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5751  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5752  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5753  *
5754  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5755  * manner.
5756  *
5757  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5758  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5759  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5760  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5761  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5762  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5763  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5764  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5765  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5766  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5767  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5768  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5769  * woke up while blocked or not.
5770  */
5771 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5772 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5773 
5774 /**
5775  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5776  * @pubsta: the station
5777  *
5778  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5779  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5780  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5781  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5782  *
5783  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5784  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5785  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5786  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5787  *
5788  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5789  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5790  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5791  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5792  */
5793 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5794 
5795 /**
5796  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5797  * @pubsta: the station
5798  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5799  *
5800  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5801  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5802  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5803  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5804  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5805  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5806  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5807  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5808  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5809  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5810  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5811  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5812  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5813  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5814  */
5815 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5816 
5817 /**
5818  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5819  *
5820  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5821  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5822  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5823  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5824  *
5825  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5826  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5827  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5828  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5829  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5830  * attempts.
5831  *
5832  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5833  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5834  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5835  * them to 0.
5836  *
5837  * @pubsta: the station
5838  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5839  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5840  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5841  */
5842 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5843 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5844 
5845 /**
5846  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5847  *
5848  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5849  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5850  *
5851  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5852  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5853  */
5854 bool
5855 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5856 
5857 /**
5858  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5859  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5860  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5861  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5862  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5863  *
5864  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5865  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5866  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5867  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5868  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5869  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5870  *
5871  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5872  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5873  * set_key callback.
5874  */
5875 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5876 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5877 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5878 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5879 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5880 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5881 				      void *data),
5882 			 void *iter_data);
5883 
5884 /**
5885  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5886  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5887  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5888  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5889  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5890  *
5891  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5892  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5893  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5894  * in removal process will be skipped.
5895  *
5896  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5897  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5898  */
5899 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5900 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5901 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5902 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5903 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5904 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5905 					  void *data),
5906 			     void *iter_data);
5907 
5908 /**
5909  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5910  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5911  * @iter: iterator function
5912  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5913  *
5914  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5915  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5916  * places while calling into the driver.
5917  *
5918  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5919  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5920  * removed.
5921  *
5922  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5923  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5924  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5925  * or not.
5926  */
5927 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5928 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5929 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5930 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5931 		     void *data),
5932 	void *iter_data);
5933 
5934 /**
5935  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5936  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5937  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5938  *
5939  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5940  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5941  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5942  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5943  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5944  * %NULL.
5945  *
5946  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5947  */
5948 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5949 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5950 
5951 /**
5952  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5953  *
5954  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5955  *
5956  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5957  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5958  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5959  */
5960 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5961 
5962 /**
5963  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5964  *
5965  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5966  *
5967  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5968  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5969  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5970  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5971  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5972  *
5973  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5974  * without connection recovery attempts.
5975  */
5976 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5977 
5978 /**
5979  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
5980  *
5981  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5982  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
5983  *
5984  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
5985  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
5986  */
5987 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
5988 
5989 /**
5990  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5991  *
5992  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5993  *
5994  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5995  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5996  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5997  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5998  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5999  *
6000  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6001  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6002  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6003  * disconnect normally later.
6004  *
6005  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6006  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6007  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6008  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6009  */
6010 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6011 
6012 /**
6013  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6014  *	rssi threshold triggered
6015  *
6016  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6017  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6018  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6019  * @gfp: context flags
6020  *
6021  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6022  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6023  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6024  */
6025 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6026 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6027 			       s32 rssi_level,
6028 			       gfp_t gfp);
6029 
6030 /**
6031  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6032  *
6033  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6034  * @gfp: context flags
6035  */
6036 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6037 
6038 /**
6039  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6040  *
6041  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6042  */
6043 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6044 
6045 /**
6046  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6047  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6048  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6049  *
6050  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6051  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6052  */
6053 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6054 
6055 /**
6056  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6057  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6058  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6059  *
6060  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6061  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6062  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6063  */
6064 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6065 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6066 
6067 /**
6068  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6069  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6070  */
6071 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6072 
6073 /**
6074  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6075  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6076  */
6077 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6078 
6079 /**
6080  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6081  *
6082  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6083  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6084  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6085  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6086  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6087  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6088  *
6089  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6090  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6091  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6092  */
6093 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6094 				  const u8 *addr);
6095 
6096 /**
6097  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6098  * @pubsta: station struct
6099  * @tid: the session's TID
6100  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6101  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6102  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6103  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6104  *
6105  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6106  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6107  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6108  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6109  */
6110 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6111 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6112 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6113 
6114 /**
6115  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6116  *
6117  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6118  * buffer.
6119  *
6120  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6121  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6122  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6123  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6124  */
6125 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6126 
6127 /**
6128  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6129  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6130  * @addr: station mac address
6131  * @tid: the rx tid
6132  */
6133 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6134 				 unsigned int tid);
6135 
6136 /**
6137  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6138  *
6139  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6140  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6141  * reordering.
6142  *
6143  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6144  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6145  *
6146  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6147  * @addr: station mac address
6148  * @tid: the rx tid
6149  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6150 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6151 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6152 {
6153 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6154 		return;
6155 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6156 }
6157 
6158 /**
6159  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6160  *
6161  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6162  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6163  * reordering.
6164  *
6165  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6166  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6167  *
6168  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6169  * @addr: station mac address
6170  * @tid: the rx tid
6171  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6172 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6173 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6174 {
6175 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6176 		return;
6177 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6178 }
6179 
6180 /**
6181  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6182  *
6183  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6184  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6185  *
6186  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6187  *
6188  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6189  * @addr: station mac address
6190  * @tid: the rx tid
6191  */
6192 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6193 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6194 
6195 /* Rate control API */
6196 
6197 /**
6198  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6199  *
6200  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6201  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6202  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6203  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6204  *	to be filled in
6205  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6206  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6207  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6208  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6209  *	RTS threshold
6210  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6211  *	if the selected rate supports it
6212  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6213  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6214  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6215  */
6216 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6217 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6218 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6219 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6220 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6221 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6222 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6223 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6224 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6225 	bool bss;
6226 };
6227 
6228 /**
6229  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6230  */
6231 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6232 	/**
6233 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6234 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6235 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6236 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6237 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6238 	 */
6239 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6240 	/**
6241 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6242 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6243 	 */
6244 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6245 };
6246 
6247 struct rate_control_ops {
6248 	unsigned long capa;
6249 	const char *name;
6250 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6251 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6252 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6253 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6254 
6255 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6256 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6257 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6258 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6259 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6260 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6261 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6262 			    u32 changed);
6263 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6264 			 void *priv_sta);
6265 
6266 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6267 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6268 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6269 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6270 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6271 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6272 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6273 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6274 
6275 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6276 				struct dentry *dir);
6277 
6278 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6279 };
6280 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6281 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6282 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6283 				 int index)
6284 {
6285 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6286 }
6287 
6288 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6289 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6290 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6291 {
6292 	int i;
6293 
6294 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6295 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6296 			return i;
6297 
6298 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6299 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6300 
6301 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6302 	return 0;
6303 }
6304 
6305 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6306 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6307 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6308 {
6309 	unsigned int i;
6310 
6311 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6312 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6313 			return true;
6314 	return false;
6315 }
6316 
6317 /**
6318  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6319  *
6320  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6321  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6322  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6323  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6324  *
6325  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6326  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6327  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6328  */
6329 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6330 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6331 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6332 
6333 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6334 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6335 
6336 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6337 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6338 {
6339 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6340 }
6341 
6342 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6343 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6344 {
6345 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6346 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6347 }
6348 
6349 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6350 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6351 {
6352 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6353 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6354 }
6355 
6356 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6357 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6358 {
6359 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6360 }
6361 
6362 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6363 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6364 {
6365 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6366 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6367 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6368 }
6369 
6370 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6371 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6372 {
6373 	if (p2p) {
6374 		switch (type) {
6375 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6376 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6377 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6378 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6379 		default:
6380 			break;
6381 		}
6382 	}
6383 	return type;
6384 }
6385 
6386 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6387 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6388 {
6389 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6390 }
6391 
6392 /**
6393  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6394  *
6395  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6396  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6397  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6398  *
6399  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6400  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6401  * matching GroupId management frame.
6402  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6403  */
6404 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6405 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6406 
6407 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6408 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6409 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6410 
6411 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6412 
6413 /**
6414  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6415  *
6416  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6417  *
6418  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6419  *
6420  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6421  * applicable.
6422  */
6423 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6424 
6425 /**
6426  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6427  * @vif: virtual interface
6428  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6429  * @gfp: allocation flags
6430  *
6431  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6432  */
6433 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6434 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6435 				    gfp_t gfp);
6436 
6437 /**
6438  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6439  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6440  * @vif: virtual interface
6441  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6442  * @band: the band to transmit on
6443  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6444  *
6445  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6446  */
6447 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6448 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6449 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6450 
6451 /**
6452  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6453  *				 of injected frames.
6454  *
6455  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6456  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6457  * of the skb before calling this function.
6458  *
6459  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6460  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6461  */
6462 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6463 				 struct net_device *dev);
6464 
6465 /**
6466  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6467  *
6468  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6469  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6470  *
6471  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6472  *
6473  * private:
6474  *
6475  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6476  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6477  */
6478 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6479 	u32 next_tsf;
6480 	bool has_next_tsf;
6481 
6482 	u8 absent;
6483 
6484 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6485 	struct {
6486 		u32 start;
6487 		u32 duration;
6488 		u32 interval;
6489 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6490 };
6491 
6492 /**
6493  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6494  *
6495  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6496  * @data: NoA tracking data
6497  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6498  *
6499  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6500  */
6501 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6502 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6503 
6504 /**
6505  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6506  *
6507  * @data: NoA tracking data
6508  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6509  */
6510 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6511 
6512 /**
6513  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6514  * @vif: virtual interface
6515  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6516  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6517  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6518  * @gfp: allocation flags
6519  *
6520  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6521  */
6522 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6523 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6524 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6525 
6526 /**
6527  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6528  *
6529  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6530  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6531  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6532  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6533  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6534  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6535  *
6536  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6537  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6538  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6539  *
6540  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6541  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6542  *
6543  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6544  */
6545 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6546 
6547 /**
6548  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6549  *
6550  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6551  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6552  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6553  *
6554  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6555  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6556  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6557  *
6558  * @sta: the station
6559  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6560  */
6561 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6562 
6563 /**
6564  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6565  *
6566  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6567  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6568  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6569  *
6570  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6571  *
6572  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6573  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6574  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6575  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6576  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6577  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6578  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6579  *
6580  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6581  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6582  */
6583 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6584 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6585 
6586 /**
6587  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6588  * (in process context)
6589  *
6590  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6591  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6592  *
6593  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6594  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6595  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6596  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6597 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6598 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6599 {
6600 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6601 
6602 	local_bh_disable();
6603 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6604 	local_bh_enable();
6605 
6606 	return skb;
6607 }
6608 
6609 /**
6610  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6611  *
6612  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6613  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6614  *
6615  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6616  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6617  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6618  */
6619 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6620 
6621 /**
6622  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6623  *
6624  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6625  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6626  *
6627  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6628  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6629  */
6630 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6631 
6632 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6633 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6634 {
6635 }
6636 
6637 /**
6638  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6639  *
6640  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6641  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6642  *
6643  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6644  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6645  *
6646  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6647  * this TXQ internally.
6648  */
6649 void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6650 
6651 /**
6652  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6653  *
6654  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6655  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6656  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6657  *
6658  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6659  * internally.
6660  */
6661 void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6662 			  bool force);
6663 
6664 /**
6665  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6666  *
6667  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6668  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6669  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6670  * next_txq().
6671  *
6672  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6673  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6674  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6675  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6676  * again.
6677  *
6678  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6679  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6680  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6681  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6682  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6683  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6684  *
6685  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6686  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6687  */
6688 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6689 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6690 
6691 /**
6692  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6693  *
6694  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6695  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6696  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6697  *
6698  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6699  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6700  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6701  */
6702 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6703 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6704 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6705 
6706 /**
6707  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6708  *
6709  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6710  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6711  *
6712  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6713  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6714  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6715  * @gfp: allocation flags
6716  */
6717 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6718 				   u8 inst_id,
6719 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6720 				   gfp_t gfp);
6721 
6722 /**
6723  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6724  *
6725  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6726  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6727  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6728  *
6729  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6730  * @match: match event information
6731  * @gfp: allocation flags
6732  */
6733 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6734 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6735 			      gfp_t gfp);
6736 
6737 /**
6738  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6739  *
6740  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6741  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6742  *
6743  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6744  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6745  *          information.
6746  * @len: frame length in bytes
6747  */
6748 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6749 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6750 			      int len);
6751 
6752 /**
6753  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6754  *
6755  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6756  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6757  *
6758  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6759  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6760  * @len: frame length in bytes
6761  */
6762 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6763 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6764 			      int len);
6765 /**
6766  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6767  *
6768  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6769  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6770  * hardware or firmware.
6771  *
6772  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6773  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6774  */
6775 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6776 
6777 /**
6778  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6779  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6780  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6781  *
6782  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6783  *
6784  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6785  */
6786 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6787 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6788 
6789 /**
6790  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6791  *	probe response template.
6792  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6793  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6794  *
6795  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6796  *
6797  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6798  */
6799 struct sk_buff *
6800 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6801 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6802 
6803 /**
6804  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
6805  * collision.
6806  *
6807  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6808  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
6809  *	aware of.
6810  */
6811 void
6812 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6813 				       u64 color_bitmap);
6814 
6815 /**
6816  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
6817  *
6818  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
6819  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
6820  *
6821  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
6822  */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)6823 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
6824 {
6825 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
6826 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
6827 
6828 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
6829 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
6830 }
6831 
6832 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6833